<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=HermanPeeren</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=HermanPeeren"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/HermanPeeren"/>
	<updated>2026-05-24T22:38:42Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:How_to_Contribute_to_Joomla!_Documentation&amp;diff=1034072</id>
		<title>JDOC:How to Contribute to Joomla! Documentation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:How_to_Contribute_to_Joomla!_Documentation&amp;diff=1034072"/>
		<updated>2025-01-23T20:15:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla! Documentation is powered by [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/MediaWiki MediaWiki]. Its growth and success is dependent on [[Special:ActiveUsers|individuals like you]]. Thank you for taking the first step towards contributing to the Joomla! Project. This page will show you how to get started and several ways of helping the documentation effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{amboxNew|image=notice|style=notice|title={{{title|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;New Documentation&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}}|text=&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;We are currently developing new documentation based on Joomla! to demonstrate the power of our CMS.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Please don&#039;t add your contributions to this wiki anymore; the information on this page is obsolete.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Your help with the update is very welcome and appreciated! Please report your suggestions, improvements or offer for assistence on [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/main/channels/documentation-suggestions Mattermost].&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting Started!== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few things you will need to do first.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Read the Wiki Policy==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to review the Joomla! Docs &#039;&#039;&#039;[[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Wiki policy|Wiki policy]]&#039;&#039;&#039; before you start editing.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a User Account==== &amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the Joomla! Documentation Wiki, you will need a user account. You may &#039;&#039;&#039;{{strikethrough|register for one here}}&#039;&#039;&#039;. Afterwards make sure to confirm your email address. Confirmation of your e-mail address will give you permission to edit any page except for a few that are protected.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: If you do not do any edit within 5 days following the creation of your account, your account will be automatically deleted for security reasons.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a User Page==== &amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created an account, confirmed your email address and logged in, we recommend you take a few moments to create a User page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a user page serves a few purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
* It lets users find out more about you.&lt;br /&gt;
* It lets you make some initial edits so that the [[User:Abuse filter|Wiki spammer and abuse filter]] can see that you&#039;re not a fake user. Note that for your first few edits, don&#039;t include external links as that will be what is most likely to trigger the filters.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A quick cheat to start your user page:&lt;br /&gt;
*On the user menu, go to your &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; page (or use first menu item on far right dropdown)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the actions drop down button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}[[File:JDOCS-actions-create-page-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click Create&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the code to editor&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{subst:Newuser}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Fill in summary (e.g. &#039;&#039;This is my new user page&#039;&#039;)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}[[File:JDOCS-summary-form-input-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Save button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Join the Documentation Communication Channels==== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla&#039;s official communication tool is [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/ Mattermost]. [[Mattermost|See this page]] for information on how to join the conversation and once you&#039;re in there, join the [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/main/channels/pd-documentation PD Documentation] channel to join the discussion on Joomla! Documentation.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==What Should I Do First?== &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are several areas of documentation which always need attention. You can start by picking the one which is the most comfortable for you to work on or you may get more involved by working on several at a time. Once you have a Wiki account, you are free to work on any aspect of the documentation that takes your fancy. Even the simplest contributions such as spelling corrections and grammar fixes are a tremendous help!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Help Manage Our Content|Help with documentation content]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Wiki Maintenance|Maintenance Tasks]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Documentation Project|Join or start documentation project]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Help Screens|Help with Help Screens]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[JDOC:Page_Translation_Explained|Page Translation Explained]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Help Manage Our Content=== &amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Editing, rewriting and reorganising pages. Check our [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Joomla!_Wiki_need_pages|Needs pages]] for areas needing immediate help. They are called &#039;&#039;Needs pages&#039;&#039; because they are in need of small tasks to complete them. Some of them are as simple as reviewing content or adding an image. Others require more content or improvements. Pick a few, give them a little love. This is a tremendous help to Joomla! users who rely on our documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Have some fun and browse for articles which are redundant, out of version (i.e. 1.0 and 1.5), or need to be split up because of version specific information. Then feel free to make use of the {{tl|delete}}, {{tl|merge}} or {{tl|JSplit}} templates on the articles. &#039;&#039;Click the previous template links to see how to use and apply them to articles you think need these marker templates. Add them to the very top of a page and the page is marked.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;&#039;Create a new page or tutorial.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you want to start a new page, do some extensive research first. Don&#039;t to create a new article if one already exists. Use the [[Special:Search|search feature]] of the Docs Wiki to see if your topic is already in an article. &#039;&#039;&#039;Duplication will be merged and/or deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;. Don&#039;t be afraid to modify, reformat or improve someone else&#039;s work on the Joomla! Docs Wiki! This is a collaborative documentation Wiki. Just make sure you are following our [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Policies and guidelines|policy and guidelines]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;Using Wikilinks.&#039;&#039; It&#039;s very easy to link pages using a standard syntax. If you create a link to an article that doesn&#039;t exist yet, the link will be colored red. Clicking a red link will take you to the edit page for the new article. Simply type your text, click save and the new page will be created. Once the page has been created, the link will change from red to blue indicating that the article now exists.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;Using the URL.&#039;&#039; To use when you want to create a page from scratch. You can use the Wiki&#039;s URL for creating a new page. The URL to an article of the Wiki is usually something like this: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://docs.joomla.org/YOURTITLE&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. If you replace YOURTITLE with the name of the page you wish to create, you will be taken to a blank page which indicates that no article of that name exists yet. Clicking the &#039;&#039;Create this page&#039;&#039; link will take you to the edit page for that article, where you can create the new page by typing your text, and clicking &#039;&#039;Submit&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;&#039;Help update images in articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the category [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Needs image updating|Needs image updating]] for a list of pages which need their images updated. Our suggested guidelines to help you are found in the article, [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Image naming guidelines|Image naming guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Wiki Maintenance=== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Maintaining a Wiki and keeping it organised takes a lot of continuous work on the part of administrators, editors and users. There are always tasks needing attention such as: [[Special:UncategorizedPages|Categorisation]], [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Joomla!_Wiki_need_pages|attending to pages with needs]], that are [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Article_under_construction|under construction]], or by marking pages for [[Template:Delete|deletion]], [[Template:Merge|merging]] or [[Template:JSplit|splitting]]. For all maintenance tasks and ideas of how you can help, please visit our [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Maintenance Tasks|Documentation Maintenance page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Documentation Projects=== &amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The Docs team is working on [[S:MyLanguage/Tutorials:Beginners|Beginner Tutorials]]. Our goal is to make them easy to understand and navigate, something a Beginner can follow easily and learn basic concepts. Think back to when you were new to Joomla! and add a topic about something you struggled with as a beginner to the page. Better yet, join the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Beginners_Tutorial_Project|Beginner Tutorials Project]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Join the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Developer Tutorials Project|Developer Tutorials Project]] and share your knowledge. Sign your name using 4 tildes ( &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;~~~~&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; ) on the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC_talk:Developer Tutorials Project|Developer Tutorials Project]] page and list what you might be able to do. Feel free to add some [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Developer Tutorials Project/Topics|tutorial topics]] to the suggested topics list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Help Screens=== &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Unknown to many, all [[S:MyLanguage/Help screens|Help Screen]] pages are created and served to every Joomla! installation worldwide from this Wiki! They are necessary for beginners and even those with intermediate knowledge of Joomla!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Joomla! 4.x Help Screens need to be reviewed and updated&#039;&#039;&#039;. Any contribution you give to them will be appreciated by many users worldwide and we&#039;re looking for volunteers to help with this important task. A matrix needs to be put in place as well as an action plan.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Things to Remember== &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few things to remember as a Joomla! Docs contributor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t be afraid to break a page, if you do and something has gone really wrong, revert your edit. Click the page&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and you will see links to undo and revert.&lt;br /&gt;
*Write articles with a sense they will be translated to another language. Using slang or local dialect may not translate to another language or its inferences be understood. Find out more about [[JDOC:Documentation Translators|Translating Joomla Documentation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t be afraid to download and read the general [https://developer.joomla.org/en-gb-user-interface-text-guidelines/introduction.html Joomla! en-GB User Interface Text Guidelines] that applies to all Joomla! Documentation. There are helpful hints on how to write for Joomla! Documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Words to watch when writing for instant feedback use Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox browsers. They both have built-in spell checking which underlines a misspelled word.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t forget to add the {{tl|inuse}} template to an article you are going to be working on it for a long period of time, more than a minute. It helps to prevent editing conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Help, I Don&#039;t Know Wiki Markup!== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are new to the use of Wikis and the simple markup to create pages, then use the following for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*New WikiEditor contains buttons and quick links to make building pages easier. Click the word &#039;&#039;Advanced&#039;&#039; for a drop down of more buttons and quick formatting links.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the [[S:MyLanguage/Help:Cheatsheet|JDOC&#039;s Wiki Cheatsheet]] to learn the basic syntax commands. There is also a drop down of the common markup in the editor. Just click the word &#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039; once and it will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Still afraid? Try these tools to help you create great Wiki pages.&lt;br /&gt;
:*[https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=12298 Microsoft Word Add-on for Wiki Markup], save Word Docs in Wiki Markup.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice.org versions 2.4 and later&#039;&#039;&#039; have a MediaWiki export filter built in. Just open a Writer document and click File - Export. Then, change File format to MediaWiki.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Here is a [[wp:Wikipedia:Tools#Importing_.28converting.29_content_to_Wikipedia_.28MediaWiki.29_format|list of tools]] available to convert other formats to Wiki markup, e.g. HTML, Excel, CSV. Some of them are online converters, cut and paste HTML for an output in Wiki markup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Get help on [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/ Mattermost] (We have a lot of channels there. E.g. one for the JDocs Translation Group and one for the JDocs Working group).&lt;br /&gt;
*Post a question on an [https://docs.joomla.org/index.php?title=Special%3AListUsers&amp;amp;username=&amp;amp;group=sysop&amp;amp;limit=50 administrator&#039;s] or [https://docs.joomla.org/index.php?title=Special%3AListUsers&amp;amp;username=&amp;amp;group=editor&amp;amp;limit=50 editor&#039;s] talk page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Wiki Information]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Volunteer Engagement{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:How_to_Contribute_to_Joomla!_Documentation&amp;diff=1034071</id>
		<title>JDOC:How to Contribute to Joomla! Documentation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:How_to_Contribute_to_Joomla!_Documentation&amp;diff=1034071"/>
		<updated>2025-01-23T20:14:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: Added a pointer to Mattermost and deleted the link to the register-page.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla! Documentation is powered by [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/MediaWiki MediaWiki]. Its growth and success is dependent on [[Special:ActiveUsers|individuals like you]]. Thank you for taking the first step towards contributing to the Joomla! Project. This page will show you how to get started and several ways of helping the documentation effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{amboxNew|image=notice|style=notice|title={{{title|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;New Documentation&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}}|text=&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;We are currently developing new documentation based on Joomla! to demonstrate the power of our CMS.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Please don&#039;t add your contributions to this wiki anymore; the information on this page is obsolete.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Your help with the update is very welcome and appreciated! Please report your suggestions, improvements or or offer for assistence on [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/main/channels/documentation-suggestions Mattermost].&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting Started!== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few things you will need to do first.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Read the Wiki Policy==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to review the Joomla! Docs &#039;&#039;&#039;[[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Wiki policy|Wiki policy]]&#039;&#039;&#039; before you start editing.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a User Account==== &amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the Joomla! Documentation Wiki, you will need a user account. You may &#039;&#039;&#039;{{strikethrough|register for one here}}&#039;&#039;&#039;. Afterwards make sure to confirm your email address. Confirmation of your e-mail address will give you permission to edit any page except for a few that are protected.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: If you do not do any edit within 5 days following the creation of your account, your account will be automatically deleted for security reasons.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a User Page==== &amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created an account, confirmed your email address and logged in, we recommend you take a few moments to create a User page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a user page serves a few purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
* It lets users find out more about you.&lt;br /&gt;
* It lets you make some initial edits so that the [[User:Abuse filter|Wiki spammer and abuse filter]] can see that you&#039;re not a fake user. Note that for your first few edits, don&#039;t include external links as that will be what is most likely to trigger the filters.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A quick cheat to start your user page:&lt;br /&gt;
*On the user menu, go to your &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; page (or use first menu item on far right dropdown)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the actions drop down button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}[[File:JDOCS-actions-create-page-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click Create&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the code to editor&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{subst:Newuser}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Fill in summary (e.g. &#039;&#039;This is my new user page&#039;&#039;)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}[[File:JDOCS-summary-form-input-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Save button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Join the Documentation Communication Channels==== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla&#039;s official communication tool is [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/ Mattermost]. [[Mattermost|See this page]] for information on how to join the conversation and once you&#039;re in there, join the [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/main/channels/pd-documentation PD Documentation] channel to join the discussion on Joomla! Documentation.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==What Should I Do First?== &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are several areas of documentation which always need attention. You can start by picking the one which is the most comfortable for you to work on or you may get more involved by working on several at a time. Once you have a Wiki account, you are free to work on any aspect of the documentation that takes your fancy. Even the simplest contributions such as spelling corrections and grammar fixes are a tremendous help!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Help Manage Our Content|Help with documentation content]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Wiki Maintenance|Maintenance Tasks]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Documentation Project|Join or start documentation project]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[#Help Screens|Help with Help Screens]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[JDOC:Page_Translation_Explained|Page Translation Explained]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Help Manage Our Content=== &amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Editing, rewriting and reorganising pages. Check our [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Joomla!_Wiki_need_pages|Needs pages]] for areas needing immediate help. They are called &#039;&#039;Needs pages&#039;&#039; because they are in need of small tasks to complete them. Some of them are as simple as reviewing content or adding an image. Others require more content or improvements. Pick a few, give them a little love. This is a tremendous help to Joomla! users who rely on our documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Have some fun and browse for articles which are redundant, out of version (i.e. 1.0 and 1.5), or need to be split up because of version specific information. Then feel free to make use of the {{tl|delete}}, {{tl|merge}} or {{tl|JSplit}} templates on the articles. &#039;&#039;Click the previous template links to see how to use and apply them to articles you think need these marker templates. Add them to the very top of a page and the page is marked.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;&#039;Create a new page or tutorial.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you want to start a new page, do some extensive research first. Don&#039;t to create a new article if one already exists. Use the [[Special:Search|search feature]] of the Docs Wiki to see if your topic is already in an article. &#039;&#039;&#039;Duplication will be merged and/or deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;. Don&#039;t be afraid to modify, reformat or improve someone else&#039;s work on the Joomla! Docs Wiki! This is a collaborative documentation Wiki. Just make sure you are following our [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Policies and guidelines|policy and guidelines]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;Using Wikilinks.&#039;&#039; It&#039;s very easy to link pages using a standard syntax. If you create a link to an article that doesn&#039;t exist yet, the link will be colored red. Clicking a red link will take you to the edit page for the new article. Simply type your text, click save and the new page will be created. Once the page has been created, the link will change from red to blue indicating that the article now exists.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;Using the URL.&#039;&#039; To use when you want to create a page from scratch. You can use the Wiki&#039;s URL for creating a new page. The URL to an article of the Wiki is usually something like this: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://docs.joomla.org/YOURTITLE&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. If you replace YOURTITLE with the name of the page you wish to create, you will be taken to a blank page which indicates that no article of that name exists yet. Clicking the &#039;&#039;Create this page&#039;&#039; link will take you to the edit page for that article, where you can create the new page by typing your text, and clicking &#039;&#039;Submit&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;&#039;Help update images in articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the category [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Needs image updating|Needs image updating]] for a list of pages which need their images updated. Our suggested guidelines to help you are found in the article, [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Image naming guidelines|Image naming guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Wiki Maintenance=== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Maintaining a Wiki and keeping it organised takes a lot of continuous work on the part of administrators, editors and users. There are always tasks needing attention such as: [[Special:UncategorizedPages|Categorisation]], [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Joomla!_Wiki_need_pages|attending to pages with needs]], that are [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Article_under_construction|under construction]], or by marking pages for [[Template:Delete|deletion]], [[Template:Merge|merging]] or [[Template:JSplit|splitting]]. For all maintenance tasks and ideas of how you can help, please visit our [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Maintenance Tasks|Documentation Maintenance page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Documentation Projects=== &amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The Docs team is working on [[S:MyLanguage/Tutorials:Beginners|Beginner Tutorials]]. Our goal is to make them easy to understand and navigate, something a Beginner can follow easily and learn basic concepts. Think back to when you were new to Joomla! and add a topic about something you struggled with as a beginner to the page. Better yet, join the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Beginners_Tutorial_Project|Beginner Tutorials Project]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Join the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Developer Tutorials Project|Developer Tutorials Project]] and share your knowledge. Sign your name using 4 tildes ( &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;~~~~&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; ) on the [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC_talk:Developer Tutorials Project|Developer Tutorials Project]] page and list what you might be able to do. Feel free to add some [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Developer Tutorials Project/Topics|tutorial topics]] to the suggested topics list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Help Screens=== &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Unknown to many, all [[S:MyLanguage/Help screens|Help Screen]] pages are created and served to every Joomla! installation worldwide from this Wiki! They are necessary for beginners and even those with intermediate knowledge of Joomla!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Joomla! 4.x Help Screens need to be reviewed and updated&#039;&#039;&#039;. Any contribution you give to them will be appreciated by many users worldwide and we&#039;re looking for volunteers to help with this important task. A matrix needs to be put in place as well as an action plan.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Things to Remember== &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few things to remember as a Joomla! Docs contributor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t be afraid to break a page, if you do and something has gone really wrong, revert your edit. Click the page&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and you will see links to undo and revert.&lt;br /&gt;
*Write articles with a sense they will be translated to another language. Using slang or local dialect may not translate to another language or its inferences be understood. Find out more about [[JDOC:Documentation Translators|Translating Joomla Documentation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t be afraid to download and read the general [https://developer.joomla.org/en-gb-user-interface-text-guidelines/introduction.html Joomla! en-GB User Interface Text Guidelines] that applies to all Joomla! Documentation. There are helpful hints on how to write for Joomla! Documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Words to watch when writing for instant feedback use Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox browsers. They both have built-in spell checking which underlines a misspelled word.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don&#039;t forget to add the {{tl|inuse}} template to an article you are going to be working on it for a long period of time, more than a minute. It helps to prevent editing conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Help, I Don&#039;t Know Wiki Markup!== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are new to the use of Wikis and the simple markup to create pages, then use the following for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*New WikiEditor contains buttons and quick links to make building pages easier. Click the word &#039;&#039;Advanced&#039;&#039; for a drop down of more buttons and quick formatting links.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the [[S:MyLanguage/Help:Cheatsheet|JDOC&#039;s Wiki Cheatsheet]] to learn the basic syntax commands. There is also a drop down of the common markup in the editor. Just click the word &#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039; once and it will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Still afraid? Try these tools to help you create great Wiki pages.&lt;br /&gt;
:*[https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=12298 Microsoft Word Add-on for Wiki Markup], save Word Docs in Wiki Markup.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice.org versions 2.4 and later&#039;&#039;&#039; have a MediaWiki export filter built in. Just open a Writer document and click File - Export. Then, change File format to MediaWiki.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Here is a [[wp:Wikipedia:Tools#Importing_.28converting.29_content_to_Wikipedia_.28MediaWiki.29_format|list of tools]] available to convert other formats to Wiki markup, e.g. HTML, Excel, CSV. Some of them are online converters, cut and paste HTML for an output in Wiki markup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Get help on [https://joomlacommunity.cloud.mattermost.com/ Mattermost] (We have a lot of channels there. E.g. one for the JDocs Translation Group and one for the JDocs Working group).&lt;br /&gt;
*Post a question on an [https://docs.joomla.org/index.php?title=Special%3AListUsers&amp;amp;username=&amp;amp;group=sysop&amp;amp;limit=50 administrator&#039;s] or [https://docs.joomla.org/index.php?title=Special%3AListUsers&amp;amp;username=&amp;amp;group=editor&amp;amp;limit=50 editor&#039;s] talk page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Wiki Information]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Volunteer Engagement{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Template:CurrentSTSVer5&amp;diff=1033934</id>
		<title>Template:CurrentSTSVer5</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Template:CurrentSTSVer5&amp;diff=1033934"/>
		<updated>2025-01-14T20:24:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: updated 5.2.0. to 5.2.3&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#switch:{{{1}}}|&lt;br /&gt;
1|&lt;br /&gt;
major=5|&lt;br /&gt;
2|&lt;br /&gt;
minor=5.2|&lt;br /&gt;
4|&lt;br /&gt;
#default|&lt;br /&gt;
maintenance=5.2.3&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--The editor of this page is responsible for ensuring the three versions are consistent!--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Template:CurrentSTSVer4&amp;diff=1033933</id>
		<title>Template:CurrentSTSVer4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Template:CurrentSTSVer4&amp;diff=1033933"/>
		<updated>2025-01-14T20:21:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: update 4.4.9 to 4.4.10&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#switch:{{{1}}}|&lt;br /&gt;
1|&lt;br /&gt;
major=4|&lt;br /&gt;
2|&lt;br /&gt;
minor=4.4|&lt;br /&gt;
4|&lt;br /&gt;
#default|&lt;br /&gt;
maintenance=4.4.10&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--The editor of this page is responsible for ensuring the three versions are consistent!--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Tutorials:Beginners&amp;diff=1033932</id>
		<title>Tutorials:Beginners</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Tutorials:Beginners&amp;diff=1033932"/>
		<updated>2025-01-14T19:43:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: removed a 3&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page is a Portal to a list Tutorials aimed at Beginning Joomla! Users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any ideas, please create redlinks to topics you would like covered under &#039;&#039;&#039;Wanted Topics&#039;&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Topics== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[S:MyLanguage/J4.x:Getting_Started_with_Joomla!|Getting Started with Joomla!]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[S:MyLanguage/J3.0:Getting Started with Templates|Getting Started with Templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[S:MyLanguage/J3.0:Getting Started with Categories|Getting Started with Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[S:MyLanguage/J3.0:Getting Started with Articles|Getting Started with Articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[S:MyLanguage/J3.0:Getting Started with Menus|Getting Started with Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[S:MyLanguage/J3.0:Getting Started Modules|Getting Started with Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[S:MyLanguage/J3.1:How To Use Content Tags in Joomla!|How To Use Content Tags in Joomla!]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[S:MyLanguage/Content_editors|Editing with TinyMCE]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Wanted Topics== &amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Resources== &amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the over 700 tutorials in the Joomla Documentation, there&#039;s a wide variety of video resources available to help you with learning Joomla.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the [https://magazine.joomla.org/all-issues/october-2020/where-to-find-the-best-joomla-tutorial-videos Joomla Magazine] there ar a lot of them found. If you know more please add them.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Joomla&#039;s own YouTube channel === &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt; The first thing you can do is head over to Joomla’s official YouTube channel, where all tutorials are neatly listed in [https://www.youtube.com/c/joomla/playlists multiple playlists]. Here you’ll find tutorials on all kinds of subjects, from customizing Joomla to patch testing. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Examples are [https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL0Lg2fzcJu1TqH4iC8sfZby_0F02Ib56p Joomla Tutorials]  playlist,&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=22RXppJjXf8&amp;amp;list=PL0Lg2fzcJu1R3q6aYKX-olfGQm_o6uXyq How to patch test] playlist and&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4JDsdfnlOhE&amp;amp;list=PL0Lg2fzcJu1R8PCZi0wVNE6QYZUqATvpE How to develop an MVC component] playlist.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Joomla training videos from OSTraining === &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt; OS Training provides online training to teach people how to build websites. For Joomla, they developed free classes on five topics: a beginners guide, maintenance, security, creating multilingual sites, and SEO. Each class contains multiple videos. With over 80 videos suitable for various skill levels, the official Joomla training covers most of the tasks you could possibly want to do with Joomla. The videos have been there for quite some time now and some of them may seem outdated, but the basics have remained the same so these tutorials are still a useful resource.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt; Find the free videos [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XpBGeHkfXpc&amp;amp;list=PLtaXuX0nEZk_4XIvoPA7O0xT_sYRKnTos here on Youtube].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt; More (paid) Videos on [https://www.ostraining.com/joomla-classes/ OS Training] and there partner [https://www.joomlashack.com/classes/joomla/ Joomlashack].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloud Access === &amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt; Cloud Access is our partner and service provider for the free joomla.com domains. On their website, they have loads of free tutorials, both video and written.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt; You can find them [https://www.cloudaccess.net/joomla-knowledgebase/92-joomla-3-1.html here] or their [https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLn5i4hx3TuLENWOYNe47PSmbDivJV_Lr_ YouTube Channel]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Tim Davis Basic Joomla Tutorials=== &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt; The Basic Joomla Tutorials channel on YouTube features Joomla tutorials and live streams that help Joomla fans and users get more success and enjoyment out of their Joomla sites. Tim Davis, the host, is very experienced in creating videos (his company provides video tutorials for their clients) and good at explaining complex things. The videos look professional and are [https://www.youtube.com/basicjoomla fun to watch].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Eoin Oliver’s Joomla Tutorials=== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt; OK, this one is a true hidden gem and we are really glad we found it: Eoin Oliver provides tips for professional web designers. If you are looking for ways to make your job easier, Eoin Oliver’s channel is the place to go! Eoin has great tips that can save you a lot of work and reduce the number of support requests. [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDMDQomkFd-3x-8l2UT3JPg Very interesting]!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Videos from JUGs and Joomla Events=== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt; Several Joomla User Groups have their own video channels where they share the videos from their meetings. Not really how-to’s, but interesting nevertheless.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Various Joomla User Groups, for example Joomla Australia and Joomla London, organise virtual meetups you can join.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Joomla Australia’s channel has a number of sessions from both JoomlaDay Australia and more recently their virtual Joomla User Group sessions. [https://www.youtube.com/c/JoomlaAustralia Visit Joomla Australia&#039;s Youtube Channel].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt; Parlez-vous Français? Check out the videos from [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCNTe8CGmY4U_Qpj8YfGQ5qQ/videos JoomlaDay France].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt; Hablas español? Podcast-channel [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCBc-rjWEkjTjJegZ2f08hnA Mastermind Joomla] has videos as well.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt; Spreek je Nederlands? Check out the videos from [https://www.youtube.com/user/JoomlaDagen JoomlaDays The Netherlands].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt; Parli italiano? On Joomla.it there is a free video course on the [https://www.joomla.it/guide/corso-joomla-3-start.html basics of Joomla] 3.x&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt; J and Beyond, the annual European international Joomla Conference, has made hundreds of interesting videos, [https://www.youtube.com/user/jandbeyondev/videos from presentations and talks on all kinds of topics].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt; [https://www.youtube.com/c/JoomlalondonUk Joomla! London have a comprehensive range of video session] from their user group over the years. Their sessions often go into an in depth level of detail on technical topics.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://community.joomla.org/user-groups.html Joomla User Groups] around the world hold a range of events locally and internationally. Check out the [https://community.joomla.org/events.html Joomla Events Calendar] for events that are coming up near you, or follow various groups to find out more about resources they may publish after the event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===More=== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Extension developers often have tutorial videos on their website as well. Akeeba, the developer of Akeeba Backup and Admin Tools, has great videos on [https://www.akeeba.com/videos.html how to use their extensions].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These are just a few of the tutorial videos available. If you type in [https://www.youtube.com/results?search_query=joomla+training “Joomla training”] on YouTube, you’ll find there are many more to choose from, for all levels: beginner tutorials, developers guides, one-time explanations on how to fix certain errors, and complete crash courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
More can be find in the category below.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:video]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_changelog_to_your_manifest_file&amp;diff=1033414</id>
		<title>Adding changelog to your manifest file</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_changelog_to_your_manifest_file&amp;diff=1033414"/>
		<updated>2024-11-12T16:36:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: update URL to refer to manual (install -&amp;gt; installation)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This page has been superseded and is no longer maintained. Please go to [https://manual.joomla.org/docs/building-extensions/install-update/installation/change-log Joomla Manual Changelogs section] instead}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Joomla version|version=4.x|comment=&amp;gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt; Tutorial&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt; Since Joomla 4.0, extension developers can leverage the ability of Joomla to read a changelog file and give a visual representation of the changelog. If a given version is not found in the changelog, the changelog button will not be shown.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt; The changes in a release will be presented in this manner:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Changelog modal-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|700px|Changelog modal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; The changelog is used in two different places.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update View === &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; The installer will show the changelog of the version that can be installed if available.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Update view changelog button-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|700px|Changelog button on the Update View]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt; Clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Changelog&#039;&#039;&#039; button here will show the changelog of the new available version.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage View === &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt; The extension manager will show the changelog of the currently installed extension if available.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manage view changelog link-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|700px|Version number is a link to the changelog modal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt; Clicking the version number here will show the changelog of the current installed version.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Add changelogurl Tag to Manifest Files == &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt; The first step is to update your manifest files that tell Joomla where to find the changelog details. Add the following node to your manifest XML files:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;XML&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;changelogurl&amp;gt;https://example.com/updates/changelog.xml&amp;lt;/changelogurl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please note: The URL in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;changelogurl&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag must not have any spaces or line breaks before or after it. See code examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Server Manifest === &amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt; See this example for an update server manifest file that informs Joomla about an update of a component named &amp;quot;com_lists&amp;quot;. Thus you will see the Changelog button in the update view.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;XML&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;updates&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;update&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;Student List&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;description&amp;gt;List of students&amp;lt;/description&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;com_lists&amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;type&amp;gt;component&amp;lt;/type&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;version&amp;gt;4.0.0&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;changelogurl&amp;gt;https://example.com/updates/changelog.xml&amp;lt;/changelogurl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;tags&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tag&amp;gt;stable&amp;lt;/tag&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/tags&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;maintainer&amp;gt;Example Miller&amp;lt;/maintainer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;maintainerurl&amp;gt;https://example.com/&amp;lt;/maintainerurl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;section&amp;gt;Updates&amp;lt;/section&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;targetplatform name=&amp;quot;joomla&amp;quot; version=&amp;quot;4.?&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;client&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/client&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/update&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/updates&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Extension Manifest === &amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally add the changelogurl tag to the extension manifest XML. Thus the extension version will be linked to the changelogs in the manage view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;XML&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;extension type=&amp;quot;component&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;upgrade&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;name&amp;gt;COM_LISTS&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... Other stuff ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;changelogurl&amp;gt;https://example.com/updates/changelog.xml&amp;lt;/changelogurl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;updateservers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;server type=&amp;quot;extension&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;My Extension&#039;s Updates&amp;quot;&amp;gt;https://example.com/lists-updates.xml&amp;lt;/server&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/updateservers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/extension&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create &#039;&#039;changelog&#039;&#039; File == &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; The changelog file must have the following 3 nodes:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* element&lt;br /&gt;
* type&lt;br /&gt;
* version&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This information is used to identify the correct changelog for a given extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;version&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; node inside any &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;changelog&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; node is always mandatory. Otherwise you will see an error message like &#039;&#039;SyntaxError: JSON.parse: unexpected character at line 1 column 1 of the JSON data&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;XML&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;element&amp;gt;com_lists&amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;type&amp;gt;component&amp;lt;/type&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;version&amp;gt;4.0.0&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt; Further the changelog is filled with one or more change types. The following change types are supported:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;security&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any security issues that have been fixed&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;fix&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any bugs that have been fixed&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;language&#039;&#039;&#039;: This is for language changes&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;addition&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any new features added&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;change&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any changes&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;remove&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any features removed&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt; * &#039;&#039;&#039;note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Any extra information to inform the user&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt; Each node can be repeated as many times as needed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt; The format of the text can be plain text or HTML but in case of HTML, it must be enclosed in CDATA tags as shown in the example.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;XML&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;changelogs&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;changelog&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;com_lists&amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;type&amp;gt;component&amp;lt;/type&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;version&amp;gt;4.0.0&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;security&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;You MUST replace this file&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/security&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;fix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/fix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;language&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/language&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;addition&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/addition&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;change&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/change&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;remove&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/remove&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;note&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item A&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Item b&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/note&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/changelog&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;changelog&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;element&amp;gt;com_lists&amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;type&amp;gt;component&amp;lt;/type&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;version&amp;gt;0.0.2&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;security&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;item&amp;gt;Big issue&amp;lt;/item&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/security&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/changelog&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/changelogs&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt; This file contains 2 changelogs:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt; * Version 0.0.2 (for testing the manage view)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt; * Version 4.0.0 (for testing the update view)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt; A changelog can have as many versions as needed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginner Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.0{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Magazine/nl&amp;diff=1033413</id>
		<title>Category:Magazine/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Magazine/nl&amp;diff=1033413"/>
		<updated>2024-11-12T16:15:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het Joomla Community Magazine is uitgegroeid tot een waardevolle bron van informatie - veel dank aan het Joomla Community Magazine Team en de vele auteurs die hebben bijgedragen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het magazine biedt een breed aanbod aan Joomla-gerelateerde onderwerpen in elke nieuwe editie. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Magazine]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Magazine/nl&amp;diff=1033412</id>
		<title>Category:Magazine/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Magazine/nl&amp;diff=1033412"/>
		<updated>2024-11-12T16:15:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het Joomla Community Magazine is uitgegroeid tot een waardevolle bron van informatie - veel dank aan het Joomla Community Magazine Team en de vele auteurs die hebben bijgedragen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het magazine biedt een breed aanbod aan Joomla-gerelateerde onderwerpen in elke nieuwe editie. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Magazine]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Category:Magazine/2/nl&amp;diff=1033411</id>
		<title>Translations:Category:Magazine/2/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Category:Magazine/2/nl&amp;diff=1033411"/>
		<updated>2024-11-12T16:15:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Het magazine biedt een breed aanbod aan Joomla-gerelateerde onderwerpen in elke nieuwe editie.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Manifest_files&amp;diff=1032489</id>
		<title>Manifest files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Manifest_files&amp;diff=1032489"/>
		<updated>2024-10-02T15:09:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: Corrected URL that refers to the manual: &amp;quot;install&amp;quot; changed to &amp;quot;installation&amp;quot;.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This page has been superseded and is no longer maintained. Please go to [https://manual.joomla.org/docs/building-extensions/install-update/installation/manifest Joomla manual Manifest Files] instead}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Joomla version|version=4.x}} {{Joomla version|version=3.x}} {{Joomla version|version=2.5|status=eos}} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Within Joomla there are manifest files for all of the extensions. These files include the general installation information as well as parameters for the configuration of the [[S:MyLanguage/extension|extension]] itself. Since Joomla! 2.5, there are very few differences between the manifest file formats for the different [[S:MyLanguage/Extension types (technical definitions)|types of extensions]], allowing each type to access the full power of the Joomla! installer.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Naming conventions== &amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be named &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;manifest.xml&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (only Joomla versions 2.5 and 3!) or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;extension_name&amp;gt;.xml&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (Joomla versions 2.5, 3 and 4) and located in the root directory of the installation package.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; Joomla 4.x: Automatic namespace mapping will fail if a manifest file named &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;manifest.xml&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is used. See: https://github.com/joomla/joomla-cms/issues/37750&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Syntax== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root element === &amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:101--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{notice|title=General Information|The new tag &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;extension&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; replaces the old &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;install&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/install&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; from Joomla {{JVer|1.5}}&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary tag of the installation file is:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=xml&amp;gt;&amp;lt;extension&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/extension&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This starting and closing tag is the same for all extensions. The following attributes are allowed within the tag:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Attribute&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Values&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applicable&amp;amp;nbsp;to&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Description&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| type || &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;component&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;file&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;language&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;library&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;module&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;package&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;plugin&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;template&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;element&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This attribute describes the type of the extension for the installer. Based on this type further requirements to sub-tags apply.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| version&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;2.5&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3.0&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String that identifies the version of Joomla for which this extension is developed. This is not used in {{JVer|3.x}} and has been removed from {{JVer|4.0}} and higher.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| method&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;install&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;upgrade&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;install&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will be also used if the method attribute is not used. The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;install&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; value means the installer will gracefully stop if it finds any existing file/folder of the new extension.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| client&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;site&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;administrator&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Modules&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The client attribute allows you to specify for which application client the new module is available.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| group&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;string&#039;&#039; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Plugins&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The group name specifies for which group of plugins the new plugin is available. The existing groups are the folder names within the directory &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/plugins&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. The installer will create new folder names for group names that do not exist yet.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Metadata === &amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following elements can be used to insert metadata. None of these elements are required; if they are present, they must be a child of the root element.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;name&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; raw component name (e.g. com_banners). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;author&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; author&#039;s name (e.g. Joomla! Project)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;creationDate&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; date of creation or release (e.g. April 2006)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;copyright&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; a copyright statement (e.g. (C) 2005 - 2011 Open Source Matters. All rights reserved.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;license&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; a license statement (e.g. NU General Public License version 2 or later; see LICENSE.txt)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;authorEmail&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; author&#039;s email address (e.g. admin@joomla.org)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;authorUrl&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; URL to the author&#039;s website (e.g. www.joomla.org)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;version&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; the version number of the extension (e.g. 1.6.0)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;description&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; the description of the component. This is a translatable field. (e.g. COM_BANNERS_XML_DESCRIPTION)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;element&amp;gt; &amp;amp;ndash; the internal name of the component. If omitted, name will be cleaned and used&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The &amp;lt;name&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;description&amp;gt; tags are also translatable fields so that the name and description of the extension can be shown to the user in their native language.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;=== Front-end files === &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;files folder=&amp;quot;from-folder&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;example.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;examples&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files to copy to the front-end directory should be placed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element. You can use the optional &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;folder&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute to specify a directory &#039;&#039;&#039;in the ZIP package&#039;&#039;&#039; to copy &#039;&#039;&#039;from&#039;&#039;&#039;. Each file to copy must be represented by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element. If you want to copy an entire folder at once, you can define it as a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;plugins&#039;&#039;&#039;, the raw name of the plugin should be placed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;plugin&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute on the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element that points to the file containing the plugin&#039;s class. For example, in the case of a system plugin called &amp;quot;example&amp;quot; (full name &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;plg_system_example&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;), use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;filename plugin=&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;&amp;gt;example.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;=== Media files === &amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;media folder=&amp;quot;media&amp;quot; destination=&amp;quot;com_example&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;com_example_logo.png&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;css&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;js&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/media&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This example will copy the file(s) (&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/media/com_example_logo.png&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;) and folders ( &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/media/css/&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/media/js/&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; ) listed to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/media/com_example/&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, creating the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;com_example&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; folder if required. You can use the optional &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;folder&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute to specify a directory &#039;&#039;&#039;in the ZIP package&#039;&#039;&#039; to copy &#039;&#039;&#039;from&#039;&#039;&#039; (in this case, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;media&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Extensions should be storing assets they need to be web accessible (JS, CSS, images etc) in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;media&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Amongst other things this feature was added as step in the progression to multi-site support and the eventual move of code files (PHP) out of the web accessible areas of the server.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: the media section is not parsed for &#039;package&#039; type extensions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ref:&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://groups.google.com/forum/#!msg/joomla-dev-cms/4CAASJqFY-k/PvPj14gP29EJ Google Groups - joomla-dev-cms thread]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://groups.google.com/forum/#!msg/joomla-dev-cms/uNmhX98sKbE/p8p68Jke680J Google Groups - joomla-dev-cms thread]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration section === &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;administration&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;!-- various elements --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/administration&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The administration section is defined in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;administration&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element. Since only [[S:MyLanguage/Component|components]] apply to both the [[S:MyLanguage/Site (Application)|site]] and the [[S:MyLanguage/Administrator (Application)|administrator]], &#039;&#039;&#039;only component manifests can include this element&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Back-end Files ==== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files to copy to the back-end directory should be placed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element under the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;administration&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You can use the optional &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;folder&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute to specify a directory &#039;&#039;&#039;in the ZIP package&#039;&#039;&#039; to copy &#039;&#039;&#039;from&#039;&#039;&#039;. See &#039;&#039;Front-end files&#039;&#039; for further rules.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Menu Links and Submenus ==== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{dablink|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Version Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Prior to Joomla 3.4, not having a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag in your manifest XML file still led to a menu item being created. This bug was fixed in Joomla 3.4, so if there is no &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag in your manifest file, then no admin menu item is created for the component.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;COM_EXAMPLE&amp;lt;/menu&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;submenu&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
			Note that all &amp;amp; must be escaped to &amp;amp;amp; for the file to be valid&lt;br /&gt;
			XML and be parsed by the installer&lt;br /&gt;
		--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;menu link=&amp;quot;anoption=avalue&amp;amp;amp;anoption1=avalue1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;COM_EXAMPLE_SUBMENU_ANOPTION&amp;lt;/menu&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;menu view=&amp;quot;viewname&amp;quot;&amp;gt;COM_EXAMPLE_SUBMENU_VIEWNAME&amp;lt;/menu&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/submenu&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The text for the main menu item for the component is defined in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; item, a child of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;administration&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. A &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;submenu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element may also be present (also a child of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;administration&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;), which may contain more menu items defined by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; item can define the following attributes:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Attribute&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Description&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| link || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A link to send the user to when the menu item is clicked. You can use &amp;quot;view&amp;quot; instead.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| img || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The (relative) path to an image (16x16 pixels) to appear beside the menu item. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Must be an url compatible as a file too (e.g. no spaces) !&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| alt ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| view || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An URL parameter to add to the link.  For example, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;menu view=&amp;quot;cpanel&amp;quot;&amp;gt;COM_EXAMPLE&amp;lt;/menu&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in com_example&#039;s XML manifest would cause the URL of the menu item to be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;index.php?option=com_example&amp;amp;view=cpanel&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You can use &amp;quot;link&amp;quot; instead.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The value inside the tag is the menu&#039;s label. Unlike Joomla! 1.5, you can not use a natural language string. For example, if you would enter &amp;quot;Example Component&amp;quot; instead of COM_EXAMPLE, it would result in your component name appearing as example-component in the menu and you would be unable to provide a translation. In order to provide a translation you need to create a file named en-GB.com_example.sys.ini in administrator/languages/en-GB (you can use the manifest&#039;s &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;languages&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag to copy it during installation) or in administrator/components/com_example/language/en-GB. In the latter case, you must not include the translation file in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;languages&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag. As long as you have placed the language directory in your &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag, it will be copied along when the component is being installed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The contents of that file should be:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;ini&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
COM_EXAMPLE=&amp;quot;Example Component&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
COM_EXAMPLE_SUBMENU_ANOPTION=&amp;quot;Another Option&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
COM_EXAMPLE_SUBMENU_VIEWNAME=&amp;quot;Another View&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:102--&amp;gt; Please note that the language string must be enclosed in double quotes, as per Joomla!&#039;s translation standards.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{note|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:103--&amp;gt; Joomla! 1.6 and later sorts the Component menu items based on the actual translation of the key you supply in your XML manifest. This means that the sorting order is correct no matter what you call your translation key and no matter which language the site is being displayed in. Essentially, Joomla! 1.6 fixed the wrong sorting of the Components menu experienced under Joomla! 1.5 for the majority (non-English speaking!) of Joomla! users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dashboards === &amp;lt;!--T:104--&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:105--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{notice|title=General Information|This code only works in {{JVer|4.0}} and later&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt; Specifies the details for displaying a dashboard for the component in the Administrator area for the site.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:107--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It will make a dashboard icon appear next to the administrator menu item for the component&lt;br /&gt;
* The dashboard icon will click through to display modules assigned to the cpanel-example administrator module position&lt;br /&gt;
* The title and icon defined in the XML file will be used as the header and icon at the top of the component&#039;s dashboard page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;dashboards&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;dashboard title=&amp;quot;COM_EXAMPLE_DASHBOARD_TITLE&amp;quot; icon=&amp;quot;icon-lock&amp;quot;&amp;gt;example&amp;lt;/dashboard&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/dashboards&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuration === &amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Warning!|Components &#039;&#039;&#039;do not support&#039;&#039;&#039; configuration definitions &#039;&#039;&#039;in the manifest&#039;&#039;&#039;. This was a way implemented in Joomla! 1.5. They can define configuration options for multiple levels using the config.xml file. For how to add this to your component read the  [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Developing_an_MVC_Component/Adding_configuration|Developing an MVC Component tutorial]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;config&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element, a child of the root, describes the configuration options for the extension. If applicable, the options will be shown by the appropriate Manager (Plugin Manager, Module Manager or Template Manager). &#039;&#039;&#039;Configuration options for Components are defined in a separate file named &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;config.xml&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Its root element should be &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;config&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, plugins and modules use the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;config&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; section in the extension manifest file.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each fieldset must contain one or more &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;field&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; elements, each representing a single [[S:MyLanguage/form field|form field]] with a label. See [[S:MyLanguage/Standard form field types|Standard form field types]] for a list of allowed form field types and example XML form field definitions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Namespace === &amp;lt;!--T:108--&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:109--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{{notice|title=General Information|This code only works in {{JVer|4.0}} and later&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:110--&amp;gt; Specify the namespace to be used for autoloading the plugin. The given namespace will autoload to the root directory of your extension by default however you can optionally add a &amp;quot;path&amp;quot; attribute to the namespace element to specify a subpath within your extensions root directory.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== SQL === &amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;install&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;file driver=&amp;quot;mysql&amp;quot; charset=&amp;quot;utf8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sql/example.install.sql&amp;lt;/file&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/install&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;uninstall&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;file driver=&amp;quot;mysql&amp;quot; charset=&amp;quot;utf8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sql/example.uninstall.sql&amp;lt;/file&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/uninstall&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example, we put the SQL files in the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;admin/sql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; folder of the installation package. You have to include the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;sql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; folder in the administration files (as described in &#039;&#039;Back-end files&#039;&#039;).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can execute SQL during the installation and/or uninstallation using the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;install&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;uninstall&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; elements, respectively. A &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sql&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element should appear as a child of these elements. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;sql&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can contain any number of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;file&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; elements, each defining a single SQL file to execute. Their database driver types are described by the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;driver&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute, their character sets by the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;charset&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; attribute.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Update of the SQL Schema ==== &amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Since 1.6, there is also an &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;update&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag, which allows you to provide a series of SQL files to update the current schema.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;update&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;schemas&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;lt;schemapath type=&amp;quot;mysql&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sql/updates/mysql&amp;lt;/schemapath&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;lt;schemapath type=&amp;quot;sqlsrv&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sql/updates/sqlsrv&amp;lt;/schemapath&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;lt;/schemas&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;/update&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in order to go from version &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1.0.0&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to version &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1.0.1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in a &#039;&#039;&#039;MySQL&#039;&#039;&#039; database, a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1.0.1.sql&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file must be created inside the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sql/updates/mysql&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; folder and the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;version&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tag of the manifest must be updated to&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;version&amp;gt;1.0.1&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The final structure of the sql folder will look like this (assuming a &#039;&#039;&#039;MySQL&#039;&#039;&#039; database)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
sql&lt;br /&gt;
 |--&amp;gt;example.install.sql&lt;br /&gt;
 |--&amp;gt;example.uninstall.sql&lt;br /&gt;
 |--&amp;gt;updates&lt;br /&gt;
     |--&amp;gt;mysql&lt;br /&gt;
        |--&amp;gt;1.0.1.sql&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similar files must be created for subsequent versions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Language Files === &amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Since Joomla! 1.5, extension developers had to put extension language files in the Joomla! main language folder using the &amp;amp;lt;languages&amp;amp;gt;...&amp;amp;lt;/languages&amp;amp;gt; tag as shown below. &#039;&#039;&#039;This method can still be used all Joomla! versions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Joomla! language tag --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages folder=&amp;quot;langfiles&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;language tag=&amp;quot;en-GB&amp;quot;&amp;gt;en-GB.com_example.ini&amp;lt;/language&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/languages&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
However since Joomla! 1.6 it is recommended that you place your extension&#039;s language files in your extension folder. Joomla! will then automatically load your extension&#039;s language files.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By storing extension language files in the extension folder, you benefit by isolating and protecting your extension&#039;s language files. For example, an administrator removes a language from their Joomla! installation. Your extension&#039;s language files will not be removed. They will remain in place and will be available if the language is installed again.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The structure of the language folder for frontend and backend is the same. You put them in the language tag (e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;en-GB&#039;&#039;&#039; ) of each language in your language folder, i.e. &#039;&#039;&#039;language/en-GB/&#039;&#039;&#039;. You have to specify those folders in the front-end and back-end files too.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In your manifest, simply include the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;language&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; folder in your files section. The sub-directories for each language will automatically be copied. Inside the &amp;lt;files&amp;gt; group, add a &amp;lt;folder&amp;gt; element alongside the items in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; group as shown in this example:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;filename plugin=&amp;quot;alpha&amp;quot;&amp;gt;alpha.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;sql&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;language&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that both ways can work together. Here is an example from core:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;filename plugin=&amp;quot;languagecode&amp;quot;&amp;gt;languagecode.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;index.html&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;language&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;language tag=&amp;quot;en-GB&amp;quot;&amp;gt;language/en-GB/en-GB.plg_system_languagecode.ini&amp;lt;/language&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;language tag=&amp;quot;en-GB&amp;quot;&amp;gt;language/en-GB/en-GB.plg_system_languagecode.sys.ini&amp;lt;/language&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/languages&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The advantages of this solution are the following:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All &#039;&#039;.ini&#039;&#039; files present in the core folder have precedence over the files in the extension &#039;&#039;language/&#039;&#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a &#039;&#039;.sys.ini&#039;&#039; file will always be loaded from core folders in the back-end if it exists, except when installing an extension which contains a &#039;&#039;.sys.ini&#039;&#039; file in a language folder. In that case and only that case, the &#039;&#039;.sys.ini&#039;&#039; file in the extension folder will display its translated content at install time. This is very handy. As a developer can have two &#039;&#039;.sys.ini&#039;&#039; files with different contents.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also, it is much easier for a user needing an &#039;&#039;.ini&#039;&#039; file for an extension that does not provide it in the language desired to add it in the main folders. There is no risk that it will be deleted in case of uninstalling the extension by mistake or any other reason.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[S:MyLanguage/J2.5:Making non-core language packs|Making non-core language packs]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[S:MyLanguage/Creating language packs for extensions in Joomla 2.5|Creating language packs for extensions in Joomla 2.5]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
During development you can turn on language debugging in the Joomla! global configuration. You can investigate if a problem arises. As of 3.2, this is necessary to help debug as en-GB is &#039;&#039;&#039;always&#039;&#039;&#039; loaded first when not in debug mode to prevent displaying Constants.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Script file === &amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;scriptfile&amp;gt;example.script.php&amp;lt;/scriptfile&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An optional &#039;&#039;&#039;script file&#039;&#039;&#039; (PHP code that is run before, during and/or after installation, uninstallation and upgrading) can be defined using a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;scriptfile&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:98--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This file should contain a class named &amp;quot;&amp;lt;element_name&amp;gt;InstallerScript&amp;quot; where &amp;lt;element_name&amp;gt; is the name of your extension (e.g. com_componentname, mod_modulename, etc.). Plugins must state the group (e.g. plgsystempluginname).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In {{JVer|4.0}} and later the structure of the class is as follows:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
use Joomla\CMS\Installer\InstallerAdapter;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
class com_componentnameInstallerScript&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Constructor&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function __construct(InstallerAdapter $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Called before any type of action&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   string  $route  Which action is happening (install|uninstall|discover_install|update)&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @return  boolean  True on success&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function preflight($route, InstallerAdapter $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Called after any type of action&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   string  $route  Which action is happening (install|uninstall|discover_install|update)&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @return  boolean  True on success&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function postflight($route, $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Called on installation&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @return  boolean  True on success&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function install(InstallerAdapter $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Called on update&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @return  boolean  True on success&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function update(InstallerAdapter $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
	/**&lt;br /&gt;
	 * Called on uninstallation&lt;br /&gt;
	 *&lt;br /&gt;
	 * @param   InstallerAdapter  $adapter  The object responsible for running this script&lt;br /&gt;
	 */&lt;br /&gt;
	public function uninstall(InstallerAdapter $adapter)&lt;br /&gt;
	{&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:111--&amp;gt; Note that since Joomla 3.6 Joomla has shipped a basic script that you can use instead of shipping your own from scratch &#039;&#039;&#039;JInstallerScript&#039;&#039;&#039; which contains various helper methods commonly used through the community.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Library Manifests === &amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{{notice|title=General Information|The section is based on {{JVer|4.0}} and later&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; A simple library manifest might look like this:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;extension type=&amp;quot;library&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;upgrade&amp;quot; version=&amp;quot;4.0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;My Test library.&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;libraryname&amp;gt;mytest&amp;lt;/libraryname&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;Classes&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;folder&amp;gt;language&amp;lt;/folder&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;mytest.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/extension&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; This will install the library into the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;JPATH_SITE/libraries/mytest&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; folder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; What if your company has several libraries and you want to group them together under folder &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;JPATH_SITE/libraries/mycompany&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; Simple - include your company name in the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;libraryname&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; property of each library like this:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;libraryname&amp;gt;mycompany/mylibrary1&amp;lt;/libraryname&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;libraryname&amp;gt;mycompany/mylibrary2&amp;lt;/libraryname&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; These libraries will then be installed in the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;JPATH_SITE/libraries/mycompany/mylibrary1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;JPATH_SITE/libraries/mycompany/mylibrary2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; folders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; Uninstalling &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;mylibrary1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will still leave &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;mylibrary2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; installed on your site.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; When using &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;script files&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with such company libraries the installer class name should look like this:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
class mycompanymylibrary1InstallerScript&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
class mycompanymylibrary2InstallerScript&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Servers === &amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;updateservers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;server type=&amp;quot;extension&amp;quot; priority=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;Extension Update Site&amp;quot;&amp;gt;http://example.com/extension.xml&amp;lt;/server&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;server type=&amp;quot;collection&amp;quot; priority=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;Collection Update Site&amp;quot;&amp;gt;http://example.com/collection.xml&amp;lt;/server&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/updateservers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Update servers can be defined in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;updateservers&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element, a child of the root. This element may contain one or more &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;server&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; element, each describing the location from which to download updates. Each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;server&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; item can define the following attributes:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Attribute&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || style=&amp;quot;width: 150px&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Values&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Description&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| type || &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;extension&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;collection&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The update server type&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| priority || &#039;&#039;integer&#039;&#039; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of the update server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| name || &#039;&#039;string&#039;&#039; || &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The name of the update server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
More info:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Developing_an_MVC_Component/Adding_an_update_server|Building a Joomla! Extension - Adding an update server]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/J2.5:Managing Component Updates|Managing Component Updates in Joomla 2.5]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;=== Supporting Download Keys === &amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt; As of Joomla 4.0.0 users can enter their download keys in the Update Sites list. This gives them a single place to manage the download keys. When a user is going to update an extension, Joomla will check if there is a download key. If there is a download key, Joomla will add the download key to the update URL.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt; To support download keys you must include the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;dlid&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; tag in the manifest file. The &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;dlid&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; tag takes 2 arguments:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* prefix&lt;br /&gt;
* suffix&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;dlid&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; tag will look like this in your manifest file:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dlid prefix=&amp;quot;dlid=&amp;quot; suffix=&amp;quot;&amp;amp;amp;dummy=my.zip&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:96--&amp;gt; The prefix will be added before the download key and the suffix after the download key. Using the example above the full query added to the download link will be:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
dlid=KEY&amp;amp;amp;dummy=my.zip&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:97--&amp;gt; The key is added before the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;onInstallerBeforePackageDownload&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; event is triggered, so the full URL will be passed to the event.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples == &amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For a real-life example, see [https://github.com/joomla/joomla-cms/blob/3.9.16/administrator/components/com_banners/banners.xml the manifest of the Banner component in the latest version of Joomla! 3.9.16].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some more examples can be found in the standalone weblinks repo:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/joomla-extensions/weblinks/blob/master/src/administrator/components/com_weblinks/weblinks.xml com_weblinks manifest]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/joomla-extensions/weblinks/blob/master/src/modules/mod_weblinks/mod_weblinks.xml mod_weblinks manifest]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/joomla-extensions/weblinks/blob/master/src/plugins/search/weblinks/weblinks.xml plg_search_weblinks manifest]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/joomla/joomla-cms/blob/3.9.16/templates/protostar/templateDetails.xml tpl_protostar manifest (3.9.16)]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/joomla/joomla-cms/blob/3.9.16/administrator/language/en-GB/en-GB.xml en-GB manifest (3.9.16)]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Specifications{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350154</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350154"/>
		<updated>2016-12-06T10:17:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: added components/com_content/views/form/tmpl/edit.php as example of defining buttons in frontend view-template&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is how it is done with frontend editing in com_content at the moment, see https://github.com/joomla/joomla-cms/blob/staging/components/com_content/views/form/tmpl/edit.php#L151-L167&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Routing and SEF URLs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually in the frontend Search Engine Friendly (SEF) URLs are used. This is different from the backend and can give some bugs. You&#039;ll have to adjust the router.php of your component. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToDo: give an example problem and solution.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Include some stylesheets and language files from the backend ==&lt;br /&gt;
To properly horizontally align the buttons and to get translations of buttons as defined in backend.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom frontend buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla!_3.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Component_Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension_development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350153</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350153"/>
		<updated>2016-12-06T10:08:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: also add some language files&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Routing and SEF URLs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually in the frontend Search Engine Friendly (SEF) URLs are used. This is different from the backend and can give some bugs. You&#039;ll have to adjust the router.php of your component. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToDo: give an example problem and solution.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Include some stylesheets and language files from the backend ==&lt;br /&gt;
To properly horizontally align the buttons and to get translations of buttons as defined in backend.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom frontend buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla!_3.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Component_Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension_development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350074</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350074"/>
		<updated>2016-12-04T15:38:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Routing and SEF URLs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Routing and SEF URLs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually in the frontend Search Engine Friendly (SEF) URLs are used. This is different from the backend and can give some bugs. You&#039;ll have to adjust the router.php of your component. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToDo: give an example problem and solution.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Include some stylesheets from the backend ==&lt;br /&gt;
To properly horizontally align the buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom frontend buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla!_3.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Component_Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension_development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350073</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350073"/>
		<updated>2016-12-04T13:31:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: added another under construction section (stylesheets to horizontally align the buttons)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Routing and SEF URLs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually in the frontend Search Engine Friendly (SEF) URLs are used. This is different from the backend and can give some bugs, especially with link-buttons. You&#039;ll have to adjust the router.php of your component. &lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Include some stylesheets from the backend ==&lt;br /&gt;
To properly horizontally align the buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom frontend buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla!_3.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Component_Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension_development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350072</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350072"/>
		<updated>2016-12-04T09:04:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: Added some categories and 2 sections under construction (routing and front end buttons).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Routing and SEF URLs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually in the frontend Search Engine Friendly (SEF) URLs are used. This is different from the backend and can give some bugs, especially with link-buttons. You&#039;ll have to adjust the router.php of your component. &lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Custom frontend buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{underconstruction}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla!_3.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Component_Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension_development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350068</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350068"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T13:10:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                &amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350067</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350067"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T13:08:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton(&#039;yourtask&#039;) to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript to handle this is included in the template head via: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350066</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350066"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T13:01:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-method in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350065</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350065"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:59:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
In the view template, where you want to display the toolbar, echo the rendered toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350064</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350064"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:56:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar or include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in the view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350063</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350063"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:53:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* How is it done in the backend? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class has a collection of static methods that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350062</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350062"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:46:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Step 1: define a toolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class is a collection of static functions that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{	&lt;br /&gt;
                // Include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
                // The toolbar is named &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
		return JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolBar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350061</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolBar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolBar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350061"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:30:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: HermanPeeren moved page J3.x:Using the JToolBar class in the frontend to J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend: JToolbar was misspelled as JToolBar&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350060</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350060"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:30:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: HermanPeeren moved page J3.x:Using the JToolBar class in the frontend to J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend: JToolbar was misspelled as JToolBar&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class is a collection of static functions that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you&#039;ll have to name it &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350059</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350059"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:21:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* How is it done in the backend? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class is a collection of static functions that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton() and prependButton() methods to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you&#039;ll have to name it &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350058</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350058"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T12:18:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: /* Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class is a collection of static functions that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton()and prependButton() methods to to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you&#039;ll have to name it &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350057</id>
		<title>J3.x:Using the JToolbar class in the frontend</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J3.x:Using_the_JToolbar_class_in_the_frontend&amp;diff=350057"/>
		<updated>2016-12-03T11:08:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: Added some background how a toolbar is made in backend and how frontend differs.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is it done in the backend? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend Joomla displays a toolbar by using the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the main administrator/index.php the &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbarHelper&#039;&#039;&#039; class is included: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
require_once JPATH_BASE . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* this JToolbarHelper class is a collection of static functions that mainly call JToolbar-methods. JToolbarHelper is used by programmers to code the toolbar in the view.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;JToolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; is the class (in libraries/cms/toolbar/toolbar.php) that actually makes the toolbar. It has a getInstance()-method to create one (and store it statically), appendButton()and prependButton() methods to to add buttons to that toolbar and a render()-method to produce the html to display the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the backend there is a module mod_toolbar that is displayed in the &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; position of the administrator template. The module echos the rendered toolbar: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$toolbar = JToolbar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;)-&amp;gt;render(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is different in the frontend if you want to use a toolbar? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the frontend we &#039;&#039;&#039;don&#039;t have&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JToolbarHelper included in the index.php&lt;br /&gt;
* a module that renders the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* a moduleposition &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; in the template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to use a toolbar in the frontend, we have to provide the missing things ourselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* or include JToolbarHelper or directly call JToolbar to code the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* render the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively we can directly code toolbar-buttons ourselves instead of using JToolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using JToolbar in the frontend ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have to do it in 2 steps: we define a toolbar and we echo the rendered toolbar in our view template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 1: define a toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the rendered toolbar to your view.html.php file in the view you wish to add the toolbar to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a getToolbar() function to your view. Here we do it by directly calling JToolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you can give it any name if you do it this way)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;save&#039;, &#039;Save&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.save&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Separator&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
		$bar-&amp;gt;appendButton( &#039;Standard&#039;, &#039;cancel&#039;, &#039;Cancel&#039;, &#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;, false );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you could include JToolbarHelper and define the buttons the same way as you do it in the backend. But you&#039;ll still have to render the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	protected function getToolbar()&lt;br /&gt;
	{		&lt;br /&gt;
		// Make a toolbar (you&#039;ll have to name it &amp;quot;toolbar&amp;quot; if you use JToolbarHelper)&lt;br /&gt;
                $bar = JToolBar::getInstance(&#039;toolbar&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // include JToolbarHelper&lt;br /&gt;
                require_once JPATH_ADMINISTRATOR . &#039;/includes/toolbar.php&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                // Add whatever buttons you require&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::save(&#039;yourviewname.save&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolBarHelper::cancel(&#039;yourviewname.cancel&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
		JToolbarHelper::divider();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		//generate the html and return&lt;br /&gt;
		return $bar-&amp;gt;render();&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step 2: echo the rendered toolbar in the view template===&lt;br /&gt;
Where you want to display the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;index.php&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;post&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;adminForm&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;?php echo $this-&amp;gt;getToolbar(); ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;input type = &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; name = &amp;quot;option&amp;quot; value = &amp;quot;com_yourcom&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Or define the toolbar buttons without using JToolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use Joomla.submitbutton() to submit the task you want to. The Joomla javascript is included in the template head via &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;/luchtreiziger-joostrap/media/system/js/core.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define your own html, directly in the view template (or via a getToolbar-mentod in your view):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-toolbar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;btn-group&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;button type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;Joomla.&lt;br /&gt;
submitbutton(&#039;yourviewname.add&#039;)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i class=&amp;quot;icon-new&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; &amp;lt;?php echo JText::_(&#039;JNEW&#039;) ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/button&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344060</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344060"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:08:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels worden door Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: stel, er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien iemand de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina bekijkt, dan staat de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor de categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; zorgt ervoor dat de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina de betreffende pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; toont.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt van de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? En waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dan zou de sorteersleutel &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039; worden. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. Het is een kwestie van: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/15/nl&amp;diff=344059</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/15/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/15/nl&amp;diff=344059"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:08:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dan zou de sorteersleutel &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039; worden. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. Het is een kwestie van: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344058</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344058"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:05:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels worden door Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: stel, er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien iemand de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina bekijkt, dan staat de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor de categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; zorgt ervoor dat de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina de betreffende pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; toont.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt van de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? En waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/13/nl&amp;diff=344057</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/13/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/13/nl&amp;diff=344057"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:05:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Waarom? En waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344056</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344056"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:03:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels worden door Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: stel, er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien iemand de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina bekijkt, dan staat de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor de categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; zorgt ervoor dat de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina de betreffende pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; toont.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt van de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/12/nl&amp;diff=344055</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/12/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/12/nl&amp;diff=344055"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T10:03:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt van de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344054</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344054"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:42:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels worden door Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: stel, er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien iemand de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina bekijkt, dan staat de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor de categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; zorgt ervoor dat de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina de betreffende pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; toont.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/11/nl&amp;diff=344053</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/11/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/11/nl&amp;diff=344053"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:42:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels worden door Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: stel, er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien iemand de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina bekijkt, dan staat de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor de categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; zorgt ervoor dat de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot;-pagina de betreffende pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; toont.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344052</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344052"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:33:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/10/nl&amp;diff=344051</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/10/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/10/nl&amp;diff=344051"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:33:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Categorie-pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn leeg en bevatten alleen een bovenliggende categorie) en worden onderdeel van een bepaald categorie-project. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, dan is dat onderaan de vertaalde pagina zichtbaar als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze alinea.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344050</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344050"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:26:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/8/nl&amp;diff=344049</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/8/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/8/nl&amp;diff=344049"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:26:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Er zijn nog een paar methodes om te leren, dus lees verder.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344048</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344048"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:23:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/5/nl&amp;diff=344047</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/5/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/5/nl&amp;diff=344047"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:23:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In het bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344046</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344046"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:22:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/4/nl&amp;diff=344045</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/4/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/4/nl&amp;diff=344045"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:22:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Categorie links lijken op standaard wiki-links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344044</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344044"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:21:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken net standaard wiki links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/2/nl&amp;diff=344043</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/2/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/2/nl&amp;diff=344043"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:21:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat iedere &#039;categorie&#039;-link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344042</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344042"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:18:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat, iedere &#039;categorie&#039; link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken net standaard wiki links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/18/nl&amp;diff=344041</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/18/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/18/nl&amp;diff=344041"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:18:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Er zijn een paar dingen die u niet moet doen.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344040</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344040"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:18:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat, iedere &#039;categorie&#039; link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken net standaard wiki links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die je niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/19/nl&amp;diff=344039</id>
		<title>Translations:JDOC:Translating Categories/19/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:JDOC:Translating_Categories/19/nl&amp;diff=344039"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:18:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit alstublieft niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344038</id>
		<title>JDOC:Translating Categories/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=JDOC:Translating_Categories/nl&amp;diff=344038"/>
		<updated>2016-11-08T09:17:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;HermanPeeren: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Het maken van categorieën is een belangrijk onderdeel om gelijksoortige pagina&#039;s te groeperen. Het kan gebruikt worden om inhoud te vinden indien pagina&#039;s niet juist aan elkaar [[S:MyLanguage/JDOC:Translating Links|gelinkt]] zijn. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning|title=Categorieën vragen om een speciale methode!|Iets waar aandacht aan moet worden besteed bij het vertalen van een pagina is dat, iedere &#039;categorie&#039; link op de pagina aangevuld moet worden met de juiste taalcode. Ze moeten ook niet verward worden met een echte link.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie links lijken net standaard wiki links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
  ten opzichte van&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het verschil is het woord en de dubbele punt &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; er voor. Category: is een speciale term die gebruikt wordt om de pagina in een categorie te zetten. In bovenstaande is Article een link, Category:Article zet de pagina in de categorie Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De vertaling van een categorie is heel makkelijk, voeg &#039;&#039;&#039;/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; toe aan het eind van de categorienaam. Hier een paar voorbeelden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/fr]] voor de Franse versie&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article/nl]] voor de Nederlandse versie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er moeten nog een paar methodes geleerd worden, dus lees verder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Doe dit===&lt;br /&gt;
Bijvoorbeeld: Als je een pagina van het Engels naar het Spaans vertaalt (taalcode &#039;&#039;&#039;es&#039;&#039;&#039;) en de pagina de volgende categorie bevat:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moet &#039;&#039;&#039;/es&#039;&#039;&#039; aan het eind van de categorienaam worden toegevoegd.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development/es]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categorie pagina&#039;s kunnen ook vertaald worden (hetgeen snel kan - de meeste zijn, behalve een bovenliggende categorie, leeg) en zijn onderdeel van een apart categorie-project als we klaar zijn. Als de categorie juist vertaald is, ziet men hem terug onder aan de vertaalde pagina als een gekleurd vierkant met witte letters. Rood betekent dat de categorie nog niet bestaat, maak je daar geen zorgen om. Zie de eerste zin in deze paragraaf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorteersleutels===&lt;br /&gt;
Wat zijn sorteersleutels? Sorteersleutels is de methode die Mediawiki gebruikt om de pagina&#039;s alfabetisch te sorteren op een categoriepagina. Ze worden toegevoegd na een &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; symbool. Indien gewenst kan de titel van een pagina overschreven worden. Bijvoorbeeld: er is een categorie genaamd &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; op de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indien een persoon de &amp;quot;Help category&amp;quot; pagina bekijkt, zien ze de pagina &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter K. Indien iemand een sorteersleutel gebruikt, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Help|H]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; voor zijn categorie-link, dan zou &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; onder de letter H komen. De code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|H&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; vertelt de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina om de pagina onder de letter &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; in plaats van &#039;&#039;&#039;K&#039;&#039;&#039; te tonen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alle vertalingen hebben een Engelse bronpagina URL/&amp;lt;taalcode&amp;gt;. Aangezien de bronpagina in het Engels is, zou de sorteersleutel, indien hij niet gezet wordt, automatisch de paginanaam worden. &#039;&#039;&#039;Krijg Hulp&#039;&#039;&#039; zou onder de letter K komen op de &amp;quot;Categorie Help&amp;quot; pagina. Bij normale vertalingen is het zetten van de sorteersleutel niet noodzakelijk. Momenteel wordt het slechts bij één categorie aangeraden om een sorteersleutel te zetten, [[S:MyLanguage/:Category:Glossary definitions|de categorie woordenlijst definities]]. Dit omdat er een alfabetische lijst wordt aangemaakt uit de pagina&#039;s uit deze categorie op sorteersleutel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Waarom? en waarom niet? In sommige talen start een vertaald woord of vertaalde pagina niet met dezelfde letter als in het Engels. Bijvoorbeeld Access Control List wordt in het Spaans vertaald als, Listado de Control de acceso. De link naar de pagina &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; op de categorie pagina zou onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039;&#039; worden getoond, want de paginanaam en het eind van de URL is .../&#039;&#039;&#039;Access_Control_List/es&#039;&#039;&#039;. Als gebruikt wordt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Listado de Control de acceso]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dit zet de sorteersleutel op, &#039;&#039;&#039;Listado de Control de acceso&#039;&#039;&#039;. De Spaanse versie van &amp;quot;Access Control List/es&amp;quot; zou nu getoond worden onder de &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;&#039;&#039; op de categoriepagina. Het gebruik van de sorteersleutel is niet altijd noodzakelijk bij een vertaling. U moet antwoord geven op de vraag: moet(en) de vertaalde woord(en) alfabetisch nog steeds onder dezelfde letter getoond worden als in het Engels?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es|Componente]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
 versus&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Glossary definitions/es]] op de Component/es pagina&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wat niet te doen bij het categoriseren==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Er zijn een paar dingen die je niet moet doen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit aub niet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het vertalen van het woord &#039;Category&#039; en de naam van de categorie.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Categorie:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maar doe dit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleen de naam van de categorie vertalen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Development]] in [[Category:Ontwikkeling]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Doe dit ook niet:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het gebruiken van Special:MyLanguage/ of S:MyLanguage/, dit is alleen voor links.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
 in [[S:MyLanguage/Category:Development/nl]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documentation Translation/nl|Categorie:Documentatie vertaling]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>HermanPeeren</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>